Fujitsu ARXA45GBLH Installation Manual

Add to My manuals
18 Pages

advertisement

Fujitsu ARXA45GBLH Installation Manual | Manualzz
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫‪TM‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻳﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARXA24GBLH‬‬
‫‪ARXA30GBLH‬‬
‫‪ARXA36GBLH‬‬
‫‪ARXA45GBLH‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻧﻳﻥ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻭﻋﺎﻡ ﻭﺷﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻧﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻬﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻑ ‪9373385202-02‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:03‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd 1‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻑ ‪9373385202-02‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪) VRF‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺑﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺭﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕﺍﻱﻭﺕﺡﻡﻝﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻓﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﺩﻳﻪ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻫﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪1...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪1................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.2‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪1............................................................................... R410A‬‬
‫‪ .2.2‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟـ ‪1.................................................................................................R410A‬‬
‫‪ .3.2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪2....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪2..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯ ًء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﺄﻟﻑ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻛﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪3.....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.3‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪3.......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.3‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪3...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.3‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪3...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪5...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.4‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪5.......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.4‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ‪5..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.4‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ )ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ( ‪5............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.4‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‪6....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ‪6..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.6‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪8................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.6‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪8...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.6‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ‪9....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪9......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ‪10..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .5.6‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪11 ..............................................................‬‬
‫‪ .6.6‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ‪13....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .7.6‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ‪) IR‬ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪13.....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .8.6‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪14................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.7‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪14.....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‪14..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪15.....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪15.....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪16.............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪.8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪16...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.8‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ( ‪16.........................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.8‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪16.........................................................................‬‬
‫‪.9‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‪16.....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻁ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﺣﻣﻲ ﺑﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺧﻁ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﺭﻗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻭﺍء ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫‪ .1.2‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪A014R‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌًﺎ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﻛﺳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﺹ ﺍﻷﻛﺳﺟﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺻﻘﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻬﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.2‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟـ ‪A014R‬‬
‫‪ .10‬ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪17......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ ، R410A‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺧﺻﻳﺻًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ R410A‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 1.6‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ‪ ،R22‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻣﺯﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺳﻼﻣﺗﻙ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﺧﺎﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺑﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺷﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ )‪ (R22‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﻌﺏ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ‪ -0.1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪5.3‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ ﻭﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪ -0.1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3.8‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ )‪ (R22‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﻋﻛﺳﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﻳﺕ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻍ ﺑﻘﻳﻣﺔ ‪ -100.7‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ )‪ 5‬ﻁﻥ‪ -755 ,‬ﻣﻡ ﺯﺋﺑﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ R410A‬ﻣﻥ ‪.HFC‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻬﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍ ﻟﺩ ﺍ ﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺃ ﺛﻧﺎ ء ﺍ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ .‬ﺳﻭ ﻑ ﻳﺅ ﺩ ﻱ ﺫ ﻟﻙ ﺇ ﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍ ﻟﺿﺎ ﻏﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻹ ﺿﺎ ﻓﺔ ﺇ ﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺭ ﻳﺏ ﺍ ﻟﻣﻳﺎ ﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻁﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-1‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:03‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:1‬‬
‫‪ .4.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .3.2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‪UTD–SF045T (P/N 9098180007) :‬‬
‫‪ 40‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 206‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1,063‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‪UTD–RF204 (P/N 9093160004) :‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫)ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺏ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗ‬
‫ﻗ‬
‫ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ 205‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺭ ‪5‬‬
‫ﻁﺭ ‪5‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺻﻐﻳﺭ( ﻭﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪ 23‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ 85‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‪UTD–LF25NA (P/N 9079892004) :‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ 195‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 22‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 239‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 507‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫)ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZC‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ‪(CNB01 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZB‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ‪(CNA01 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZD‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ‪(CNA02 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZ7‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ‪(CNA03 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZE‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ‪(CNA04 /‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪UTY-XSZX‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ‪IR‬‬
‫‪UTB-*WC‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪UTZ-PX1NBA‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪A‬‬
‫)ﻓﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪B‬‬
‫)ﻓﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪) VP25‬ﻗﻁﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ ,32‬ﻗﻁﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪(25‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺯﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Ar-2‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:03‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:2‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫]ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻠﻭﻱ[‬
‫‪ 500‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻣًﺎ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪ 500‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫‪ .1.3‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻼﻧﻘﻼﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫‪ 300‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﺎﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻠﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺯﻳﺕ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺗﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺳﻠﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻣﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻭﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻳﺎﻑ ﻛﺭﺑﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﻗﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻼء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭﻩ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺑﻭﻝ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻭﻧﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫]ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻠﻭﻱ[‬
‫‪ 1,550‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪ 500‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺩﻧﻲ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 300‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻭ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .3.3‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﻭﻱ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺣﻣﻝ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﻛﻭﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ (RB‬ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1.3.3‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﻁﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ(‬
‫)‪ (8‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺗﺿﺧﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (9‬ﺧﺫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (10‬ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 740‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫)‪ (11‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ‪ ,80%‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 477‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ .2.3‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1,177‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫‪ 1,135‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫‪ 150‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ *‪1‬‬
‫‪ 400‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫*‪ 400 1‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ(‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻫﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫‪ 270‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫‪Ar-3‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:03‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:3‬‬
‫‪ .4.3.3‬ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺏ )‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺧﻁﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ(‬
‫ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ ‪) 4 ‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪(.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‪ 550 :‬ﻣﻡ‪ ,‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪ 410 :‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﻭﺛﺑﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ‪M10‬‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪) A‬ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻓﻠﻛﺔ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪) B‬ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﻗﻁﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ 9.81‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 14.71‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪.B‬‬
‫‪ .2.3.3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﺍء‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻗﻁﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻠﺗﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ )ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﻳﺳﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺷﻕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ(‬
‫ﺷﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺷﻕ‬
‫ﺷﻕ‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺭﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﻁﻔﻳﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3.3.3‬ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1,015‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 240‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻠﻧﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪ ,‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ‪ 1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪) .‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻫﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ‪(.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺳﻳﻧﺗﺷﺭ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-4‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:02‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:4‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺳﺣﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻁﺭﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻷﺟﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﺣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﻳﺗﺭﻭﺟﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﻋﺑﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ .1.4‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻫﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻫﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻼﻧﺳﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.5.3.3‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺳﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﻋﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﻋﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺣﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺗﺯﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺳﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺟﻡ‪ 10/‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍﺋﻬﺎ )ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ(‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻱ ﻟﻼﻧﺳﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻠﻭﺛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ(‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺣﺏ ﻫﻭﺍء ﻧﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺷﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ R410A‬ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻱ )‪ ،(R22‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ R410A‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺃﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺩﻧﺔ )‪(R410A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ]ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫ﺷﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ]ﻣﻡ[‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫‪1.00‬‬
‫‪1.20‬‬
‫ﺷﻕ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﺑﻳﻧﺔ )ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪ .2.4‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻳﻧﺔ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻱ(‪ ,‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ )ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻳﻧﺔ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻱ(‪ ,‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺟﺭﺡ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻭﺍﺋﺏ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 120‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ,% 70‬ﻓﻘﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ‪ 70‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ,% 80‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺳُﻣﻙ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ,% 80‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺳُﻣﻙ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺳُﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ 0.045‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪)/‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻳﻠﻔﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ )ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 20‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3.4‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ )ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻁﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻬﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻧﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺃﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ‬
‫‪Ar-5‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:02‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:5‬‬
‫‪ .1.3.4‬ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣﻳﻥ ‪.2‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻭﺍﺋﺏ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ )ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﺭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺭﺻﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺻﻘﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ]‪ [L‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺳﻕ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺏ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫]ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ‪] A‬ﻣﻡ[‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﻟـ ‪،R410A‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ‪] B-00.4‬ﻣﻡ[‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪0.5‬‬
‫‪9.1‬‬
‫‪13.2‬‬
‫‪16.6‬‬
‫‪19.7‬‬
‫‪24.0‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ )‪ (R22‬ﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ‪ ،R410A‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ‪ A‬ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ )ﻟﻠﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ‪ (R410A‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ]ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ]ﻣﻡ[‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫‪ .2.3.4‬ﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺛﻧﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺗﻣﺩﻫﺎ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺛﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ]ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫‪ (1/4) 6.35‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ (3/8) 9.52‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ (1/2) 12.70‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ (5/8) 15.88‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ )ﻛﺟﻡ ﻗﻭﺓ·ﺳﻡ([‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 160) 18‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(180‬‬
‫‪ 32‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320) 42‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(420‬‬
‫‪ 49‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 490) 61‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(610‬‬
‫‪ 63‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 630) 75‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(750‬‬
‫‪ (3/4) 19.05‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 90‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 900) 110‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(1,100‬‬
‫‪ .4.4‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫• ﺍﻋﺯﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ( ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﻑ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺛﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ )ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺎﺯﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺗﻁﻭﻕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺑﻌﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ(‪ ,‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ( ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ(‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻧﻛﺳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3.3.4‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻁ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺯﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻳﻁ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻧﻳﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺑﻭﻟﻲ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻝ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻼﺻﻕ )ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺑﻭﻟﻲ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻝ( ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻋﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺻﺭﻑ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺗﺑﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻔﺫ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪ 1/100‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺟﻣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-6‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:02‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:6‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ(‬
‫‪ 240‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ PVC‬ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﺭﻑ )‪(VP25‬‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﻑ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 114‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 66‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ(‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 240‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻛﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ‪ ,1‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﺱ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ )‪(VP25‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ‪2.5‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5.0‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ )ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﻫﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ‬
‫‪ 1.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2.0‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻧﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﺑﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ )ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ‪ PVC‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ (VP25‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺎﻗﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (4‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (5‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻭﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ PVC‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪Ar-7‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:02‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:7‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ .1.6‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻣﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻗﻭﻯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‬
‫‪ 230‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 198‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 264‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ 50‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫‪ 198‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 253‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ 60‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻔﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺳﻠﻙ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ .2%‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺑﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .A‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫‪MCA‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻛﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻷﺟﻝ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARXA24GBLH‬‬
‫‪1.00‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARXA30GBLH‬‬
‫‪1.12‬‬
‫‪ARXA36GBLH‬‬
‫‪1.68‬‬
‫‪ARXA45GBLH‬‬
‫‪2.12‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺩﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ .(RB‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻁﺋﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺩﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻳﺩﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ :MCA‬ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :MFA‬ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺑﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪ MCA‬ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪ RB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ‪ MCA‬ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،RB‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪.RB‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪ RB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .B‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ( ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪MFA‬‬
‫ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫* ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ "ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ‪ +‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ "RB‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ 0.1 ,‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ 44‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ 45‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪** 148‬‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ 0.1 ,‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫* ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪.RB‬‬
‫** ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ‪ 44‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ‪ 30‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.1.6‬ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺅﻫﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫)ﻣﻡ‪(2‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﺑﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺿﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪2.5‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ IEC57 60245‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ +‬ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺭﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺭﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻭء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫‪0.33‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪LONWORKS‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 22‬ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ )‪(AWG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪ (NEMA) 4‬ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 0.65‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ,‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)ﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻠﻙ(‬
‫‪ 0.33‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪1.25‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ PVC‬ﻣﻐﻠﻑ*‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺑﻲ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)ﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫‪0.33‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ PVC‬ﻣﻐﻠﻑ*‬
‫ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻁﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻐﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-8‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:02‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:8‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ .2.6‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﻲ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪1* RB‬‬
‫‪ .B‬ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺩﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺷﻳﻕ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻔﻛﻭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺛﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫*‪3‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫*‪3‬‬
‫*‪2‬‬
‫*‪3‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻭﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﻻ ﺗﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺭﻁ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ 2‬ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺯﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ 2‬ﻛﺑﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ُﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪.RB‬‬
‫*‪ :2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ( ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺃﺭﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :3‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.Y3‬‬
‫)ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺭﺓ ﻹﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺯﻉ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪M4‬‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪(L, N, GND/‬‬
‫* ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ( ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺃﺭﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1.2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1.8‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫)‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 18‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺳﻡ(‬
‫‪ .2.3.6‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ .3.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫‪ 25‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.3.6‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻐﻠﻑ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﻗﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪ 35‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 25‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫‪ 25‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 25‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ .A‬ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺛﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪.Fig. A‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fig. A‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻭﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻻ ﺗﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺭﻁ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩ‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺯﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (6‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ 2‬ﻛﺑﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺯﻉ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻁﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫‪Ar-9‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:02‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:9‬‬
‫ﻋﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0.6‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫)‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪) M3‬ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ‪(X1, X2/‬‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪(Y1, Y2, Y3/‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻁ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫)‪(SW1‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪:Y1‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺑﻲ‬
‫‪:Y2‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺑﻲ‬
‫‪:Y3‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ*‪1‬‬
‫‪:Y1‬ﺃﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫‪:Y2‬ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫‪:Y3‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ )‪(SW1‬‬
‫‪2WIRE‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ(‬
‫‪3WIRE‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ‪ ،Y3‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ(‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪:X1، X2‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫‪:Y1،Y2،Y3‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪:L, N‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ( )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ )‪ ,(SW1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-10‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:01‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:10‬‬
‫‪ .5.6‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‬
‫)‪(CNA03‬‬
‫)‪(CNA01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪SW1‬‬
‫‪SW2‬‬
‫‪SW3‬‬
‫‪SW4‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫)‪(CNA02‬‬
‫)‪(CNA04‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫)‪(SET 2‬‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫● ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ )]‪([CNA02]، [CNA04‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫)]‪.([CNA02]، [CNA04‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ )‪(CNB01‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CNA02‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﺃﻭ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ" ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺑﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ CNA03‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CNA04‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ .(AWG22‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ‪ 150‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫*‪d‬‬
‫*‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫*‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪1‬‬
‫*‪c‬‬
‫ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪3‬‬
‫‪CNA04‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫*‪ c‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ d‬ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ )]‪([CNA01]، [CNA03‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ )]‪CNA01]،‬‬
‫‪.([[CNA03‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫*‪a‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺄﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺯﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺣﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪K1‬‬
‫‪K4‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫*‪a‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪3‬‬
‫‪CNA03‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪a‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪K2‬‬
‫‪K5‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫*‪ 1‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﺽ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺩًﺍ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪ 2-1‬ﻭ‪.3-1‬‬
‫*‪ a‬ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪ 5 :‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ b‬ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ]‪ [-‬ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ .3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺣﻝ‬
‫*‪b‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫‪K3‬‬
‫‪K6‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫‪ K1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :K6‬ﻣﺭﺣﻝ‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺯ‬
‫● ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪[SW2 2‬‬
‫ﻧﺑﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺽ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 200‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ(‬
‫ﺣﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺑﺽ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ"‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫‪Ar-11‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:01‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:11‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺑﺽ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫‪CNB‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫* ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪3‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺣﻝ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ"[‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪2-1‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺑﺽ"[‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪3-1‬‬
‫‪CNB01‬‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪4-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫* ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ"‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺑﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻏﻠﻳﻅ ﻣﻌﺯﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻌﺩ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻙ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺑﺽ"[‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫• ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ" ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻷﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ ,‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﺃﻭ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ" ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫]ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ" ﻓﻘﻁ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA03‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA04‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ .(22AWG‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ‪ 25‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ‪ ±2 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ 50 :‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫‪CNB‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫‪Ar-12‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:01‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:12‬‬
‫‪ .6.6‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ .7.6‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ‪) RI‬ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ‪.IR‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫• ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫• ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ )‪(CN8‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‬
‫‪(CN18)IR‬‬
‫• ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫• ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺏ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ*‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ )ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ "‪:"30‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) ."00‬ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫• ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ "‪:"31‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪."02‬‬
‫* ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ .4.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ" ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-13‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:01‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:13‬‬
‫‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ .8.6‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫• ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻌﺯﻭﻝ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪"0" :‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪"0" :‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫)‪(CNA05‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪63‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫)‪(CN106‬‬
‫‪IU AD × 1‬‬
‫‪IU AD × 10‬‬
‫• ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪99‬‬
‫‪REF AD × 1‬‬
‫‪REF AD × 10‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(IU AD × 1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(IU AD × 10‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺣﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ IU AD SW‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.A Table‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(REF AD × 1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(REF AD × 10‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ REF AD SW‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪ A Table‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ "‪."00‬‬
‫)ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪A Table‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ*‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ*‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ‬
‫*ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫‪REF AD SW‬‬
‫× ‪10‬‬
‫×‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪IU AD SW‬‬
‫× ‪10‬‬
‫×‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (3‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ....... IU AD, REF AD SW‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ )‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺛﻣﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ .................‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ IU AD, REF AD SW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(0‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ .......................‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ IU AD, REF AD SW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(0‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )‪ (IU AD SW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.99‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-14‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:00‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:14‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ .3.7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫‪ (i‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(RC AD SW‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑـ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ RC AD SW‬ﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪.0‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪15‬‬
‫‪RC AD‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪ 4‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 00‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 02‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 03‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 04‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 05‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 06‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 07‬‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 08‬‬
‫‪09‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 09‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 10‬‬
‫‪RC AD SW‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 12‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 13‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪SP 14‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ SP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ(‬
‫‪ (ii‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(RC AD SW‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻠﺯﻣﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪ AR45‬ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ,"14‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ "‪) 11‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪."(SP 11‬‬
‫‪ .2.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪ AR36‬ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ 13‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ,"14‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ "‪) 12‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪."(SP 12‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "31‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ SP‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ(‪ ,‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪ 40‬ﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ )‪ (AR24‬ﻭ ‪50‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ )‪ AR30‬ﻭ‪ (AR36‬ﻭ ‪ 60‬ﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ )‪.(AR45‬‬
‫)ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﺱ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪ SET 3 SW1‬ﻭ‪ SW2‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Table B‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ "‪"SET3‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪SW SW SW SW‬‬
‫‪1 2 3 4‬‬
‫‪B Table‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫‪) A‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪SET3‬‬
‫‪SW1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪SET3‬‬
‫‪SW2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪Ar-15‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:00‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:15‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ .4.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.8‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ(‬
‫)ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ" ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.8‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ‪ ،EEV‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ‪) OPERATION‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻭ‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ(‬
‫ﺑﺑﻁء ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻛﺎﺏ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ "ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪ "IR‬ﺃﻭ "ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ .9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻗﺻﻳﺭ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(2‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(2‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(3‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫○‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﻛﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .01‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺄﺧﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.02‬‬
‫○‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪02‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫○‬
‫○‬
‫○‬
‫○‬
‫○‬
‫○‬
‫○‬
‫)ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫○‬
‫)ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫○‬
‫)ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫○‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ .01‬ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.02‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 6‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .01‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .02‬ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.03‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ )ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ?‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ )ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ(?‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ؟‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ؟‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺟﻬﺩ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻌًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﻣﺅﺭﺿﺔ(?‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ?‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺩء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ?‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻳﻝ؟‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ,01‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ( ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-16‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:00‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:16‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.10‬ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫‪OPERATION‬‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( )ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪TIMER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪FILTER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪) UTY-RNK* / UTY-RNKYT‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫*‪) UTY-RNR*Z‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(10‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺗﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﺻﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ(‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫)‪(15‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(13‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪RB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪) [Next Page‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ( )ﺃﻭ ]‪[previous page‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ( ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪) [Error Information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪) [Status‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫*‪) UTY-RLR‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ "ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪ "IR‬ﺃﻭ "ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0.5 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ 0.5 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪ 0.1 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ 0.1 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫) ( ‪ :‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫‪Ar-17‬‬
‫‪1/9/2017 PM 2:16:00‬‬
‫‪9373385202-02_IM_AR.indd Sec1:17‬‬

advertisement

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement